Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 .

2 .

electrical panels. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing engineering workflows. and plumbing fixtures. such as duct. Germany. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and piping. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical. 3 . fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.

For example. When you open a training file. Contact your CAD manager for more information. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. annotations. So. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. and sheets to document the project. When you install the training files as instructed. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. to provide a richer and more finished design. views. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. You do not design entire systems.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Metric file names have an _m suffix. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you can choose to save your work. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. For example. however. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. when you add ductwork. However. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. is located and accessed in the training files location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. such as templates and families. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. and tags. as well as how to open and save them. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. your Training folder may be in a different location. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . In this exercise. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Create detail views. Create schedules. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. On the Contents tab. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation. templates. you learn where the training files are located. After completing each exercise.

double-click Imperial or Metric. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. click ➤ Save As. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt. verify that Project Files (*. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click Save. you are prompted to save the changes. and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane. 4 Click the training file name. For File name. and you can open any supported file type. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 8 If you have made changes.rvt) is selected. the Open dialog displays. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Open. enter the new file name. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt and make changes. For example. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For Files of type. scroll down. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

the door retains this relationship to the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. sections. quantities. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. every drawing sheet. and phases when you need it. 2D and 3D view. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. drawing sheets. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. scope. In the Revit MEP model. and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. schedules. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the operation of the software is parametric. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. drawings. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. hence. ■ ■ 7 . What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If the length of the elevation is changed. and plans. If you move the partition. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. In this case. You learn the terminology. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In mathematics and mechanical CAD.

sprinklers. They display in relevant views of the design. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. boilers. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . sprinklers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and electrical panels. For example. ducts. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. dimensions. sinks. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. walls and ceilings are hosts. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. grids. and keynotes are annotation elements. and electrical panels. Examples include detail lines. tags. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. When you change something. They help to describe or document the design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and 2D detail components. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. filled regions. sinks.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. dimensions. levels. ducts. boilers. For example. tags. For example.

For example. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. This information includes components used to design the model. In Revit MEP.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. The project file contains all information for the building design. and ceilings. you must be in a section or elevation view. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you do nothing to establish these relationships. By using a single project file. from geometry to construction data. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. first floor. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. programming is not required. top of wall.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. such as roofs. and drawings of the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. families. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. views of the project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. elevation views. floors. Project: In Revit MEP. Often. you can explicitly control them. Most often. for example. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In other cases. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. To place levels. North . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and so forth). Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. However. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . If you can draw. section views. or bottom of foundation. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and types. schedules.

You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. System families can be transferred between projects. and similar graphical representation. Type: Each family can have several types. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. hiding. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. For example. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. identical use. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A type can be a specific size of a family. showing. You can also display several project views at one time. such as a A0 title block. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Unlike system and standard component families. With a few clicks. Then experiment with them. System families include ducts. A type can also be a style. and wires. However. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. each in-place family contains only a single type. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). pipes. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To return the panel to the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file.

When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and settings. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. project and system parameters. and for switching views. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for editing existing elements. then select what you want to modify. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. select the tool first. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members..

a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). For example. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. closes the application menu (double-click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays frequently used tools. By default. To keep a panel expanded. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides access to common tools. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. when adding duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.

Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish.... Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. (Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open. click.

(Publish) print the current drawing. family. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. saves a current project.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to.On the application menu. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. publish the current project. but is not enabled by default. Camera. click.. or template file. To enable or disable a tool item. family. and Walkthrough. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. annotation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Print) access product and license information. (Licensing) close the file. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

However. Starting with the most recent command. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. In addition. check the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. When you are highlighting an element or component. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. when you switch to another editing mode. To hide the Status Bar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. or the Family Editor. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Clipboard. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clear the Status Bar check mark. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. workshared components. Group. displaying the same information. When you are using a command.To undo or redo a series of operations. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. To show the Status Bar again. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. repeat the command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Modify. This displays the command history in a list. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create.

select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify). use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . On the Quick Access toolbar. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.To cancel or exit the current command. for example. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. To change existing elements to a different type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an element in a drawing. Place a Wall.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 1 Click ➤ Open. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. In the following steps. click Training Files.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click . When you release the mouse button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. In the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. on the Navigation bar. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 .

Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press ESC. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog. moving the wheel to the desired location. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click the SteeringWheels tab. As you move the mouse. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. ➤ Options. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 14 To exit the wheel. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and then using the Zoom tool again.

When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Similar controls. display along the ends. called drag controls. as shown. and open Level 2 . and select the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you are familiar with these tasks.HVAC Plan . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. referred to as shape handles. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. These are the drag controls. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Small blue dots. 2 Enter ZR.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. In this example. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. on the Standard toolbar.

click to specify the starting position. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . such as Move and Copy. you want to move the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command.Some commands. for example. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and drag it to the left as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and click again to specify the ending position. 11 With the duct already selected. After selecting the element to move.

Press ESC twice. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.End a command Some commands. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Supply. Select Mechanical . For example. Click OK. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 13 To end a command. such as the Modify Ducts command.Return. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric ➤ Templates. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 7 In the Project Browser. New projects inherit all the families. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. under Create new. and click Open. and open North. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and modify system settings. create and manage views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. the default building levels and standard views. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. use copy/monitor. You can either select a template from the template library. such as the default project units and settings. You can choose from several templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you learn how to start a project from a template. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. such as ducts and pipes. click Training files. select Project. under Template file. and loadable families. 27 . system families. 6 Click OK. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. In that case. Finally. and geometry from the starting template. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. link files.rte template.

select School or University. ■ ■ Under Create new. 10 Using the same method. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ For Building Construction. Click OK twice. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Energy Data. (Browse). for City. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. click (Browse). Click OK. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . create another new project using the Construction template. navigate to Metric Templates. When you select the material. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. select Manchester.rte template and click Open. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Choose Template dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. under Energy Analysis. NH. Click Cancel. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Level 1. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. For example. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can select it now. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.8 In the drawing area. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. For Location. click Edit. If you want to use a template other than the default. review the construction materials listed. select Project template.

they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.000 mm. and fire protection systems. and 310. plumbing. and demand factors for electrical systems. 25 In the left pane. power distribution systems.00 mm. 26 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Views. piping.00 mm. 24 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Duct Settings. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 140. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. For Categories.00 mm. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 27 Click OK. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. for 90. select Identity Data. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. wiring. click Rectangular. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. for 20. 110. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. under Duct Settings.00 mm. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 290. click Round. under Pipe Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 22 In the right pane.00 mm. 33 Click OK. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 140. for 90. 23 In the left pane.rfa and click Open. Holding CTRL. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 260. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.00 mm. click Sizes.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Click OK twice. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. click Wiring. 110.

An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. and groups that are contained in a project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . To enable this coordination. select View Name. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. In addition. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training. For Then by.rvt. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. under Create new. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Select Ascending Click OK twice. From the Positioning list. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Associated Level. select Sub-Discipline. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.Origin to Origin. Click Open. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. sheets. click Browse. families. Linking Projects In this exercise. For Then by. select Family and Type. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Sort by. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 4 In the New Project dialog. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. under Template file. select Auto . 38 Close the file. 5 Click OK.

reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 8 If necessary. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Linking Projects | 31 . Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .Mech. select Room Bounding. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Constraints. select the linked architectural model. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.

Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. click the level line for 03. 19 On the left side of the view. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. click Plan View types. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER.Floor. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.

The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. appears above the copied elements. and the level 4. 29 In the drawing area. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. highlight the linked model. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. 34 On the Basics tab. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. for the link file. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. warnings notify you of any violations. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. indicating that an element has changed. a warning message displays. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. select Custom. and click to select the linked model.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Linking Projects | 33 . and that the copied elements are monitored. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. level 3. If you modify a monitored element. After copying. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. click By Host View. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. click Custom. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. 27 In the drawing area. indicating that a relationship is established. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link.

4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Site. click Custom. Click OK. click Custom. click Edit.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Click OK. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Select Show categories from all disciplines. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 2 In the New View Template dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. under View Properties. for Name. select Custom. Roads. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 7 Click OK twice. 5 On the Basics tab. Under Visibility. 3 In the View templates dialog. deselect Parking. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. deselect Levels. Under Visibility. and Topography. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. for the link file. Planting. 36 Click OK.

Modifying General System Options In this exercise.rte. These settings control the graphics. selection default options. journal cleanup options. 5 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. 8 Click ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings | 35 . 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. select Mechanical and click OK. they are not saved to project files or template files. and click OK. under View Templates. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. click the Graphics tab. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. notification preferences. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. select Invert background color. 9 In the Options dialog. and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 3 Under Colors. Notice that the drawing area is black. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying System Settings In this exercise.

the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. When an error occurs. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click OK. However. select yellow. you specify default file locations. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. the elements causing the error display using this color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click the File Locations tab. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. select None. 12 Click the General tab. 18 Select the wall. 13 Under Notifications. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and click OK. select One hour. family template files. 11 In the Color dialog. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 19 Press ESC to end the command. For Tooltip assistance.10 Under Colors. and family libraries. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 21 Close the file without saving it. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click the value for Selection color. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. including your default project template. 17 Press ESC to end the command.

However. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Places. 4 Click Cancel. and Import dialogs. 10 In the Places dialog. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Specifying File Locations | 37 . you can start a new project with that template. In the following illustration. select the folder to save your files to by default. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Load. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. click Browse. When you are opening. Click and click Browse to select a template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process.3 Under Default template file. ➤ New ➤ Project. TIP To view a template. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 8 Click Cancel. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. click Browse. under Default path for family template files. 7 In the Options dialog. note the list of library names. or loading a Revit MEP file. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Save. and you can create new libraries. You can modify the existing library names and path. and click Open. saving. such as in a large. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. centralized. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 5 Under Default path for user files.

18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click the My Library icon. templates. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click (Add Value). 15 Under Library Name. Save. and Import dialogs. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click OK twice. and click (Browse). and select it as the library path. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Load. and change the name to My Library. and click Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.11 In the Places dialog. or families. ➤ Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.

you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click the Spelling tab. 14 Click in the drawing area. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 20 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 11 In the Options dialog. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. view the current path. 22 Select My Library. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 2 In the Options dialog. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. select Ignore words in uppercase. 9 In the text editor. If you work in a large office. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. enter sheetmtl-Cu.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. such as bump maps. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. This path is determined during installation. 19 Click Cancel. specify the new location here. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Places. 21 On the File Locations tab. custom color files. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. click OK. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 27 Click OK. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 5 In the text editor. and decal image files.

This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.17 In the Spelling dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. under Dimension Snaps. 25 Close the file without saving it. 4 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Template file. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Edit. 2 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Restore Defaults. 23 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click File menu ➤ Save. As you zoom in and out within a view. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Close. click OK. 24 In the Options dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click the Spelling tab. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Under Settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. In this exercise. click Browse. and enter 500 . click OK. work with snapping turned off. 18 Click ➤ Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. you modify snap settings.rte. 6 In the Snaps dialog.. 22 In the text editor.

Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If it does not. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. For example. use the wheel button on your mouse. 10 On the Options Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter SM. such as ZO to zoom out. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If you do not have a wheel button. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. While sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. and move the cursor to the right. zoom out until it does so.7 Under Object Snaps. 8 In the Snaps dialog. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. click OK. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. deselect Chain.

the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right. the midpoint.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Notice that snapping is once again active. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 25 Click OK. with or without saving it. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Do not set the wall end point. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. If you move the cursor along the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and delete the value 500 . 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 19 Enter SM. and the wall edges. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 26 Close the file. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously..

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

If the tutorial training files are not present.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. duct system and a hydronic piping system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you create the mechanical system. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. 45 . In this lesson. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you first plan the system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. water source heat pump (WSHP). it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. and then you create a plenum level. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. After finishing each exercise. you first configure the linked architectural model. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you design a mechanical system for an office building. In this exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. At the end of the tutorial. you can choose to save your work. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This system consists of a cooling tower. By following the recommended workflow. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will understand the process. However.autodesk. go to http://www. After applying a color scheme to the zones.

under Constraints. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this section. click to select it. click Training Files. and double-click West . roof. select Room Bounding.rvt. not in the MEP training file. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Next. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . ceilings. 6 In the Project Browser. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. and after the linked model highlights. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding.MEP. you add a level for plenums. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. These components are defined in the architectural training file. NOTE When working with a linked file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 16 Press Esc. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Click Plan View Types. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and click Properties. For Offset. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and in the Plan View Types dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. The new level is placed. and enter Level 2 Plenum. enter 2600mm. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 9 On the Draw panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Verify that Make Plan View is selected.

However. Under Identity Data. In this exercise. click Edit. enter an Offset of 300mm. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Under View Depth. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for View Scale. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In the next exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Level. for View Range. 20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. enter 0. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. right-click Level 2 Plenum. ■ Click OK twice.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then place spaces in various types of areas. For View Classification. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Default View Template. select Design. NOTE After finishing each exercise. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. select Level Above (Level 3). verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select MEP . Under Extents. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. for Top.Plenum. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select Plenum Plan. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can choose to save your work. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and for Offset. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For Cut plane. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. For Sub-Discipline.

For Offset. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. select Horizontal. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. walls. select New. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and ceilings). Placing Spaces | 49 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For (Tag Location). indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. For Space. For Upper Limit.

enter 219.7 Click to place the space. ensuring coordination between the files. For Name. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 14 In the drawing area. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter Library. 9 Select the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

20 Click in the Library to place the space. 21 Using the method learned previously. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. enter 0. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. select Level 3. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.

23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. and then press Esc. enter 0. select Level 3. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. for Upper Limit. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and for Offset. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.

10 Click in the number column. In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 9 In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and select Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to the newly placed space. and change the space number to 216A. click in the name column. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 15 Press Esc twice.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 11 Close the schedule view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase. place a space in the lower area of the split space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . If necessary. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

and click Element Properties. expand Spaces. select the space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. In the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. enter 0. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Upper Limit. click in the chase area to place the space. 10 In the plan view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Enter VG. select Interior and Reference. select Roof Level. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.4 Press Esc. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Level 3. right-click. On the Options Bar. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. For Offset. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.

Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . under Loaded Tags. enter 1200.■ For Limit Offset. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. floors.Space Plan. 17 Type ZF. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. All spaces in the view are tagged. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter Chase. For Number. and maximize the view. enter 225PC. 15 Press Esc. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. for Name. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . ceilings. Under Identity Data. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Bounding elements (such as walls. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.

60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. To display space reference lines. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click Reference. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .20 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. indicating that it’s the active view. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. under Spaces. click Training Files. After a space is placed in an area. In the next exercises.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.Zoning is highlighted. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Next.Zoning is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.rvt. The Zone tool is active. select Occupiable. you assign spaces to a zone. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. click Reference. and a new zone is created. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The graphic in the System Browser updates. under Spaces. ) or 5 In the System Browser. To display space reference lines. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. indicating that it’s the active view. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. the Edit Zone tab displays. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. indicating that the space is occupiable. you assign spaces to zones in the building. under Energy Analysis. and click OK. As you do this.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ).

you can add or remove a space from the zone. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Using the Edit Zone tab. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area. and click Finish Editing Zone.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Instruction. and modify the zone properties. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Instruction 221. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. type VG. you need to activate the zone visibility. 4 In the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 5 With the drawing area active. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. In the System Browser.

you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. enter 2 .Zoning. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning view to activate it. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. under Identity Data. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 11 Close the System Browser. under Spaces. click Finish Editing Zone.Area B. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). for Name. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. expand 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . To display space reference lines. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.West . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.TIP After you finish editing the zone. In this exercise. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m.West . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. indicating that it’s the active view. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You activated zone visibility in the views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Click in the Level 1 . 9 In the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning is highlighted. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .rvt.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.

15 Press Esc. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. Verify that the distance is 12mm.Zoning view. 8 In the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Select Attached End. click in the Level 2 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. zoom out. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .

Zoning view. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. you verify the building. click Training Files. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. click the corner where the Top.rvt. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. verify that Wireframe is selected. for Name Value. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. and zone information. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and click OK. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and select 109 Lounge. on the ViewCube. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . enter Lounge . double-click the zone tag. double-click Level 1 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.East. Front. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.Zoning to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). space.

Using the Highlight tool. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. select 1_South_Area C. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Next. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. With 109 Lounge selected. you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. click (Isolate). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ Click (Highlight). All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ ■ On the Details tab. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.

Next. click . Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . click . and dehumidification set point. ■ ■ ■ Next. scroll down in the left pane. click (Shading). the space information displays for the selected space. heating air temperature. outdoor air per area. cooling air temperature. For Cooling Information. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. Below the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.11 °C : 32. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. verify that 21. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. verify that <Building> is selected. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. select Lounge/Recreation. For Heating Information. select 109 Lounge.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Next. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. click . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This indicates the heating set point. For Construction Type. and then click OK. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.33 °C : 12. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and air changes per hour. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and humidification set point. For People. the zone information displays for the selected zone.22 °C : N/A is specified.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and in the People dialog. and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that 23. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and click OK. For Electrical Loads. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected.

Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 15 In the Project Browser. click Cancel. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. open MEP . The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. enter 0.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Offset. floors. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. roofs. and other room-bounding components.

enter 212P. Under Energy Analysis. for Number. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and select space Plenum 212P. Click OK. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Because this is an unoccupied space. select Plenum. For Name. and verify that the space has replaced the void. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).Modify space properties 19 Select the space. you verified building. Under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plenum. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and zone information. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

under Energy Analysis. is selected. click Edit. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. NH. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. If. verify that New Construction is selected. click in the Value field. Click OK twice. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. enter 03101.Space Plan. and click Element Properties. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and click OK. this option adjusts the times automatically. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . you need to select this option. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Ground Plane. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. select School or University. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Energy Data. click Training Files. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the Place tab. for Building Service. 8 In the drawing area. verify that Manchester. On the Weather tab. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 300 is specified. double-click Level 2 . In order to select a space. For Project Phase. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Postal Code. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. For Export Complexity. select space Library 219. right-click. under Volume Computations. For Location. and click OK. for City. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that Level 1 is selected. For Building Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that <Building> is specified.rvt.

In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. click Edit. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and then click . In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. for Values. a cooling load. 12 Click the Details tab. both. for Values.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. m.Audio Visual. Select the space associated with the warning. For Location. verify that <Building> is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Space Type. is specified. Select Area per person. select Actual. enter 60 W. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 45 W. For Sensible. or neither. select Specified. Click OK twice. for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Building Construction. For Latent. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Library . for Values. verify that School or University is selected. For Building Service. select Actual. click Edit. click in the Value column. and enter 15 sq. select Heated and cooled. Next. Click OK. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Condition Type. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. NH. For People. and click OK. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. You have verified the building information. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Under Power. select Specified. verify that Manchester.

22 Close the file with or without saving it. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. or zone information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. weather. click Information). the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. You should correct the space error in the building model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . In this exercise. select 219 Library. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. or make any changes to the model. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 16 After you review the loads report. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and under Heating Information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and click OK. and zone information for the building model. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and a loads report displays. click Calculate. 15 Review the loads report for project. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 17 In the loads report. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space. and can be modified here. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. select 219 Library. 19 In the drawing area.11°C. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. under Energy Analysis. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. space. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library.

5 Zoom in to the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 3 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Zones. Click OK.rvt. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in relatively small increments.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.Expanded Ranges. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. select Cooling Load .

Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the next exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . click Training Files.rvt. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. 11 Using the method learned previously. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.

■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter .Space Fill is the active view. In the Schedule Properties dialog.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Airflow Delta. For Phase. and then click . more category options are available. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Formula. For Name. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Type. Under Available fields. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. click (Browse). For Discipline. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select HVAC. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Space Airflow Schedule. ■ Click Calculated Value. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. Click OK. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select New Construction. Select Schedule building components. In the Calculated Value dialog. In the Fields dialog. select Spaces. For Formula. Click OK. select Air Flow. for Select available fields from. for Formula. and click OK.

For Then by. For Value. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Under Conditions to Use. Select Ascending. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select Number. click the color swatch. select Level. and Blank line. select Not Between. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. In the Color dialog. Header. Click OK twice. verify that Show is highlighted. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. and then select Hidden field. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and then click Conditional Format. ■ The schedule displays. right-click to access schedule properties. select Level. select Airflow Delta. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Background Color. and click OK. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. For Fields. select red.

and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces.

In this lesson. Then. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. As you place the air terminals. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you modify air terminal parameters. After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you will create supply air systems. After system creation.

2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.

verify that Constrain is cleared. 9 On the Placement panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Also. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 13 On the Options Bar. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc to end the command. select the diffuser. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. type 3600. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. as shown. and press Enter. for Flow. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 215 L/s. click Place on Face. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. If the host element is modified or moved. the hosted elements are updated as well. 17 Move the cursor down. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. which in this case is the ceiling grid.

As you place the return diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. click Yes. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 25 In the drawing area. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 28 On the Placement tab. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next. and then press Esc. and click Open. 24 In the Open dialog. 29 Place 2 diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 22 In the drawing area.rfa. select one of the diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.

open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. for Reference. 32 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click to select the lines. as shown. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. click Yes. and click OK. Level.

select the vertical grid line as shown. 43 Using the same method. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. align the other return diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. and then press Esc twice. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 40 In the drawing area. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.

46 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 47 Using the same method. clear LeftArrow. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. select both return diffusers. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and press Enter. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. for Flow. and click Element Properties.44 While pressing Ctrl. right-click. As you place the air terminals. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. enter 310 L/s.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. for Scale. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and double-click Level 1 . 10 In the drawing area. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click 1 : 100.rvt. the space crossing lines display. 2 On the View Control Bar. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. expand HVAC . 9 On the Options Bar.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 8 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design to make it the active view. select M_Supply Diffuser .200 Neck. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. at the lower left corner of the building.HVAC Plan . When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.

Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. Click OK. As a result. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. enter 170 L/s. Under Mechanical . By copying the diffuser. enter 2400. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. and then press Enter. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. for Flow. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Also.Airflow. for Offset. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. type 6000. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Select the diffuser. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. under Constraints. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. move the cursor down. 15 Press Esc.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser.

16 Using the same method. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. and then press Esc.

change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. under Other. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . Next. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and then right-click in the schedule. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. enter 210 L/s. select Mark. type. for Sort by. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. click Edit. for Embedded Schedule. and press Enter. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 Using the same method. 27 In the schedule. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. select Air Terminals. 25 Click OK 3 times. mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Flow. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. under space 115. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Category. double-click System Type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Mark. and click View Properties. and Flow. tile the windows. select 21. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 26 Using the method learned previously. Type. it is a negative value.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. under Available Fields.

as shown.HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. As you highlight the zone.Design. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. and maximize Level 1 . 31 In the drawing area. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

High Efficiency . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.Horizontal .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.3 times the heating load). verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.7-18 kW .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. select M_WSHP . 36 In the drawing area. 35 In the Type Selector.43 W (approximately 1. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. and under Energy Analysis. 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

rvt. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. enter . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and click OK. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. As you add diffusers to systems. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. 6 Keep the System Browser open. In this exercise.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. for Constraints ➤ Offset. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click View ➤ Systems. After creating the logical connection. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. including energy analysis. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You then create the logical connection between the system components. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. When you highlight a space. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. the space crossing lines display. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. However. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. right-click the title.

On the Options Bar. and Flow value. 17 Using the method learned previously. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 12 In the System Browser. Connect Into. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the number of elements is updated. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the system connects them. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. System Name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 18 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. review the Number of Elements. 15 Click Cancel. the air terminals are the children. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 11 In the drawing area. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled.

22 Click OK. under Mechanical. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. which updates the name in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Rename the system Next. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.rvt. 26 Click Finish Editing System. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. under Identity Data. 25 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for System Name. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. for Mark.

which provides various layout tools. For Offset. click Settings. the space crossing lines display.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.Round. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. for Solution Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and display solution 1. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select the upper left diffuser. For Flex Duct Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan. In this case. the Network type provides several solutions. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. enter 3000.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. enter 3000. 4 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. indicating that it’s the active view. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .Design is highlighted. For Duct Type. A Generate Layout tab displays. Select Branch. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Network. Also. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. For Offset.

Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. click Modify. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 900. Click OK. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as is the elbow itself. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. or offset elevations are incorrect. 11 Click Finish Layout. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. you’ll get an error in a later step. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. as shown.

If the entire network does not highlight. fittings. a disconnection exists. and click OK. and equipment.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.Flow. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the main duct. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. thus it is not part of the system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. The first time you press Tab. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Using a flow-based color scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. for Color Scheme. Usually. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. select Duct Color Fill . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and click to select it. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. you can verify connectivity as you create a system.

under Mechanical . and then click OK. select By View. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and on the Options Bar. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 20 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. for Values Displayed. select one of the diffusers in the system.Airflow. under Graphics. but not all values are used in this view. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and click OK. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. for Flow. and press Enter. 17 In the Type Properties dialog.

and then click to select it. select the color scheme legend. and drag it to the right. click Cancel. select Calculated Size Only. for Schemes. Select Only. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Select the upper segment of main duct. Under Constraints. 26 Click OK. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and then press Esc to clear the selection. for Branch Sizing. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and select 400. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. highlight a segment of the duct. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and enter . 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select Restrict Height.65 Pa/m. select Friction. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Click OK.Velocity. select Duct Color Fill . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. static pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Using this tool. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The ductwork and fittings are updated.

rvt. also known as the critical path. 35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.

Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. indicating that it’s the active view. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. and click Draw Duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.3D MEP. click the corner where the Top. right-click the connector grip. enter 3000. 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. select the top right diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Front. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. double-click MEP . NOTE When drawing duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.

select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. in space 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 25 Press Esc. and select the top left diffuser. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.22 Using the same method. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.

you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify.

verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click OK. clear Restrict Height. for Flow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. select a segment of the main duct. and click OK. such as a plenum. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Mechanical . press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow. and click to select it. 40 Using the same method. under Constraints.

108 .

Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you place mechanical equipment. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. including 2 base mounted pumps. In this lesson. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 109 . Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Create return and supply piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. on level 3 of the building model. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.

Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan .rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in corridor 328. and select M_WSHP .7-18kW .Left Return . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Horizontal High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted.

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 600.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. click the dimension. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. 8 Click the corridor wall face. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. verify that Wall faces is selected. click the top edge of the WSHP. 7 On the Options Bar. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . as shown.

and in the Type Selector. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.) 14 Click Modify. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .11 Press Enter and then press Esc. select the 2 WSHPs. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

enter 0.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .75 L/s. as shown. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Offset. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Click OK. enter 2750. 21 Click Modify. Under Mechanical. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. for Water Flow. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.

but without a corresponding system. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems).22 Close the file with or without saving it. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

where it is easier to review the information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and click View ➤ Piping. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Therefore. As you assign equipment to systems. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the System Browser.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 5 In the System Browser. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. select the 2 WSHPs.Mech 330). Assigning a system component to an existing system. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. right-click the Systems column heading. click Training Files. This display indicates that the system is selected. Creating a Piping System | 115 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. while pressing Ctrl. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. You have created the hydronic return system. 13 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that on the Options Bar. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and the Edit System tool is not active. 12 In the drawing area.

21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. double-click Roof . In cooling mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.HVAC Plan . You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 26 Click Finish Editing System. Creating a Piping System | 117 . Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. In heating mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 22 In the Select Connector dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design. 25 Select the boiler. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.

expand Piping. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand the Hydronic Return system category. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Expand All. 32 In the System Browser. and click OK. You also manually modify the layout path as required. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 29 Right-click CHWS. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Column Settings. for Water Flow. and click OK.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. indicating the logical connection. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The hydronic supply system highlights in red.8. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. In the System Browser. and click Select. and click Properties. 28 Using the same method. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. enter 0.

4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you can place the cursor over a system component. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 5 In the Filter dialog. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.HVAC Plan . A system preview displays in red. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Check None.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. the boiler. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). and click to select it. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. then the Select a System dialog displays. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. press Tab to highlight the system.Mech 330).Design is highlighted. select Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. structural beams. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. select Perimeter. or architectural components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. duct. 11 On the Options Bar. click Settings. For Inset. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. enter 450. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. It does not reference the architecture. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 On the Generate Layout tab. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that Solutions is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.9 In the Select a System dialog. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 10 Click OK. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. select CHWR.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.75 L/s. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. to display the path with thinner lines. the flow for each WSHP is 0. 17 Optionally. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. With each Tab. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK.75 L/s). and access its instance properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc.50 L/s.50 L/s. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 23 Under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 1.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Number of Elements is now 8. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). double-click Level 1 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Project Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Edit System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 27 On the System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. On the Options Bar. Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System.HVAC Plan .Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. so the total flow of 6. 38 Using the same method. Next. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. under Mechanical.44 L/s.94 L/s. which propagates flow throughout the system.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.94 L/s. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. access its instance properties.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. note that the value for Flow is 4. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.50 L/s. you physically close the CHWR loop. 35 Using the drag control. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. as shown. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select a WSHP. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Inset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 0. For Slope.00%. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and then click OK. 40 In the Select a System dialog.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. 41 Click OK. Click Settings. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. enter 450. select Perimeter 1 of 5.

47 In the drawing area.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 46 Click Modify. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. To create the piping system. as shown. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 50 Using the same method. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Either relocate the system components. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . or manually modify the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 51 Click Finish Layout. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.

As you work in the training file. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. indicating that it’s the active view. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. as shown. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. double-click 3D Building.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete. as shown. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. select the boiler. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.

13 In the plan view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top).11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the lower one is secondary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the boiler. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and click Draw Pipe. 12 In the 3D view. select the return pipe riser. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. The connections are automatically created.

and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 600. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right.In a plan view. enter 381. for Offset. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and you select 1 connector.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. 18 Press Esc twice. select the primary base mounted pump. and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. As you place piping runs that are close together.

right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. and select it. and click to draw the pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays.

enter 1200. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.28 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. right-click the bottom control on the tee.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.■ Move the cursor down. type 300. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and press Enter. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. enter 2850.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system. Next. You now have a closed loop system.

44 L/s). select the cooling tower. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. Connect the cooling tower Next. When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. 40 Click Cancel. notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. notice that Flow is 6. and click Element Properties.44 L/s. 43 Press Esc. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 42 Click OK. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. and click Element Properties. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 48 In the plan view. and click OK. as shown. In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. view the properties for the secondary pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. the value is 0 L/s.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. which is rounded up to 3. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. right-click. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. for Cooling Water Flow. under Mechanical.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. 50 In the 3D View.44 L/s. and close the dialog.

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .52 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Adding Valves In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.rvt. When the valve is open. and is heated by the boiler.

and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 145 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. The bypass valve is closed by default.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_Ball Valve . verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. place another M_Ball Valve . 12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

19 Using the same method. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click Element Properties. and click OK. under Mechanical. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click. Adding Valves | 147 . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. validate that the Flow is 6. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.

22 Using the method you just learned. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. and select M_Ball Valve .rvt. In heating mode. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.44 L/s.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select M_Ball Valve . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Initially.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).

indicating that it’s the active view. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. select Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.HVAC Plan .Size. for Schemes.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Flow. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.

and click to select the branch. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Under Constraints. select Friction.5 m/s. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and for Velocity. for Branch Sizing. 13 Press Esc. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Either relocate the system components. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 1. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Select And. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or manually modify the pipe. and enter 220 Pa/m.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.rvt. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.Design ➤ 3D Views. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Inspecting the System | 151 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and double-click 3D Building. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. pressure. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using the System Inspector.

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. as required. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). as shown. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.

In this exercise. and double-click Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 Using the same method.rvt. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. you need to validate them.Note that the Flow is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Fluid Temperature. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. inspect Section 6 again.4 Pa. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. and click OK. Warnings display.HVAC Plan .Design. the Static Pressure is 41916. and to size pipe. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.0 L/s. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .1 Pa. select 32° C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.7.

154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. and click Show to view all of the system components. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. After you assign components to a system. and for pipe sizing. 12 In the System Browser. TIP If you have multiple views open.Design floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click View. double-click Level 1 . and select Level 3 . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 6 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. As you learned when placing components. right-click Hydronic Return. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 9 Right-click CHWS. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. For example. and confirm unassigned system components. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). right-click the Systems titlebar. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 7 In the System Browser. and click Expand All. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). If you place components without assigning them to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 4 In the System Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. In the System Browser.Design. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 10 Using the same methods. thus assigning the components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. click Close. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the pipe is associated with that system. After you have assigned all components to systems. otherwise.

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

select Copper. distribution systems. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. wiring. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select Wiring Types. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. You also add a wiring type. click Training Files. Click OK. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select 90.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. enter 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. speeding up the design phase. click (Open). As you place components and create circuits. select Copper. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.Wire Sizes. enter 70. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. For Factor.04. ■ ■ For Material. expand Wiring . For Temperature. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Material. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Correction Factor.rvt. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. ■ Click New Correction Factor. enter THHN.

select Hot Conductor Size. For L-L Voltage. select Power. For Neutral Size. enter 240. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 220. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 2000. select Demand Factors. Under More Than. select 120. select Distribution Systems. For Maximum. select 10000 VA. For Value. select 3. select THHN. Click OK. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. For Minimum. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Voltage Definitions.0. For L-G Voltage. enter 240. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 120/240. For Phase. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. enter 250. For Wires. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Max Size. Select Neutral Required. select 75. select 240. enter 50. By specifying a range. select Steel. For Neutral Multiplier. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. enter 1. select Single. For Conduit Type. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click Split. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Insulation.

select Electrical . restrooms. For Group Parameter Under. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Type of Parameter. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.rvt. select Spaces. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.Lighting Plan. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial. 5 In the drawing area. select Electrical. select Illuminance. Click OK twice. such as offices. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this case the key style is the type of space and. click Training Files. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. click (Open). and double-click Level 2 .Lighting. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. under the Electrical . click Add.Lighting group in the space element properties. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Verify that Instance is selected. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Discipline. Under Categories. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. and conference rooms. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.

9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. Click OK. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical . 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. select Spaces. double-click Required Lighting Level. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. enter Open Office. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. enter 485. For Name. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. and click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Lighting Levels. under Available Fields. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row.Lighting. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. enter Space Lighting Requirements. and for Key Name. Select Schedule Keys.

The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. which is mapped to project units. change the sort order back to the default setting.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. 22 Using the same method. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Select Blank Line. select Required Lighting Level. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 Click OK twice. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Notice that as you enter the data. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Identity Data. click (Open). Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . In this exercise. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. 27 Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. the value input applies only to the selected space. for Lighting Levels. select Instruction-Standard.

■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx.00 lx. and press ENTER.00 lx. enter 200. and click (Add Value) five times. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes.00 lx. Select the scheme for At Least 20.rvt. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add.00. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. select Spaces. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Under Schemes. and click (Add Value). For example. and in the At Least column. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. click (Duplicate). enter 900. 00 lx still selected. enter 800. click (Add Value) again. ■ Click OK. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and press Enter. select Required Lighting Level. for Title. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. Select the scheme for 500 lx. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. enter Required Lighting Levels. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. for Name. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .00. for Category. For Color. Select the scheme for 450. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. verify the By Range is selected. enter Required Lighting and click OK. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. and press ENTER. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. then the new value will be 400 lx.

enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Discipline. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click Number. For Type. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. 13 Click Calculated Value. For Color Scheme. select Required Lighting. Name. Level. Click OK. select Illuminance. select Spaces. 8 In the drawing area. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. enter Lighting Delta. select Spaces. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical. For Name. Average Estimated Illumination.Lighting CF. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . and double-click Level 2 . and Required Lighting Level. for Available Fields.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser.

select Red. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.■ For Formula. for Sort by. click Browse. for Custom Colors. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type a hyphen. for Fields. Select Blank Line. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK. select Level. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. On the Formatting tab. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. for Formula. select Not Between. Select Header. press the spacebar. for Test. For Value. Click OK twice. and click Browse. under Condition. select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Required Lighting Level. Click Conditional Format. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. Click Background Color. Click OK three times. select Average Estimated Illumination. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

171 . power circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create a panel schedule. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Then.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. First. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads.

You can create additional color schemes. In the Color dialog. Under Scheme Definition. click Training Files. for Basic Colors. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Average Estimated Illumination. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. By using orange as the color for this range. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Orange. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting CF view is open. 8 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the color legend. click (Open). then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Click OK. for the Spaces Category. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 13 Click the Level 2 . The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.

Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.277V. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 18 Click to place the fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.the +/. 19 Press ESC to end the command. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. for Apparent Load. for Name enter and click OK.00 VA. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 162. ■ Under Electrical Loads.

For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ Under Photometrics. enter . Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Placing Switches. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click (Open). 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Placing Switches. Under Electrical. 2 In the drawing area. Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. select Xenon and click OK. Click OK. and receptacles to your design. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 In space Library 219. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Training Files. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select 463T5_S. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. In the next exercise. for Type Mark. Under Photometrics. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes. Junction Boxes. you add switches. click the value for Light Loss Factor. select the top center fixture. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. junction boxes. for Lamp. enter . In the left pane of the Open dialog.ies and click Open. enter F15. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the Select File dialog. and click OK. specify 15000.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Color Preset. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Click OK twice. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ Click Apply. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. select Luminous Flux. for Ballast Loss Factor.85.00 lm. Under Photometrics.93. click the value for Initial Intensity.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.277V. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type M_Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. Select M_Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Junction Boxes.

for Mark. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter 2750. 21 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219.14 Press ESC to end the command. enter JB-1NL. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. NOTE When entering values. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Level 2 . you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click OK twice. note the Number of Poles is 1. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Offset. Under Electrical. Click Edit Type. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Select the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.

and Number of Elements. NOTE If necessary. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Name. Click OK. Expand Electrical. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column. Space Number. Expand General. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 26 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Select Size. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 187 . Placing Switches. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Distribution System. and Voltage. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. right-click and click Column Settings.

29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Junction Boxes. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . 38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. move the cursor along the wall. 40 On the Options Bar.

42 Move the cursor down. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).208V MCB . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click Training Files.Surface: 100A. zoom to the space Electrical 220.rvt. and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter LP-2B. select 480/277 Wye. 8 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. #1 Pole Breakers. 14 Select the panelboard.Loads. for Max. Click OK. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter PP-2B. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. for Max. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 20.480V MCB . 7 Press ESC to end the command. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.

24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . and for Category. click Check None.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. which is the logical connection between the elements. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. 20 In the drawing area.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 42 In the Filter dialog. 2 In the drawing area. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. enter 2. and create permanent wiring. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. select Wires. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Click OK. click (Open). 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. except without wire. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. for Hot Conductors.39 Using the same method. click Check None.Loads. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and verify that Load. 13 In the System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Expand Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. expand Power. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Click OK. Voltage. Distribution System. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Rating. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and then expand circuit 1. ■ 16 In the System Browser.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Click Tags. change the Voltage to 277V. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. under Electrical. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 30 Close the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

click below the first one to place it. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. for Type Mark. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 40 Click OK twice. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter FR4. Click Yes. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 44 In the Edit Label dialog. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. For Circuit Number. click Edit Type. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 In the drawing area. Click OK.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 35 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Break. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. under Identity Data.

51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. Click OK. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. click Training Files. 57 In the Filter dialog. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 54 Select all of the tags. select Lighting Fixture Tags. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. click Check None. click (Open). 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for File Name. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter a comma. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. Click Save.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 52 In the Save As dialog. and click Apply. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a switch system. and for Category. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.rvt.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. for Switch ID. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 2 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. under Electrical .

click Check None. Circuits are used for power. select the PP-2B panel. under Electrical . The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 2. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. and click Element Properties. for Hot Conductors.Loads. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. Click OK. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and data systems. lighting.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 4 In the Filter dialog. select Electrical Fixtures.

navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 15 In the Load Family dialog.rfa. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Wiring. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 19 Click OK. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the right pane.13 Select the wire again. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and in the drawing area.

click the connector of the first receptacle. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 . add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 28 In the drawing area. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 26 Press Delete. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. 29 In space Instruction 221.

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Next you balance the loads for your design. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.

click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 3 In the Electrical space. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Scroll down. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 1-#12. the distribution is shifted. Had there been a greater imbalance.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Training Files. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 In the drawing area. enter 30A. click Rebalance Loads. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Click OK. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. zoom to space Electrical 220. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Finally. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. for Rating. Under Electrical-Loads. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 1-#10.rvt. After re-balancing loads. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select panel LP-2B. 1-#12. 6 Click OK. 1-#10. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

12 Select panel PP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 15 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. 24 Click Select Panel. and click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. for Rating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. for Rating. under Electrical . 14 Close the warning dialog.Loads. under Electrical . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click Finish Editing Circuit. enter 40A. Next you create a panel schedule. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click OK. enter 25A. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.

select Bold and Italic. Select PP-2B. 6 In the Project Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. click Training Files.rvt. 4 Close the report. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Under Header Text. Click OK. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. The Panel Schedule Report displays. enter 4 mm. expand Sheets (all).Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. click (Open). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open E601 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. for Font. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 5 In the Project Browser. under Other. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. click Edit. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 10 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text. for Font Size. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. enter 5 mm. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. for Appearance. for Font Size. select Berlin Sans FB. Under Body Text. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Panel Schedules. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Unassigned. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select space Lounge 212. click Training Files.rvt. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. click (Open). ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. each with a load of 180VA.

19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Checking Your Design | 215 . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. for Panel. 17 In the drawing area. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. zoom to space Electrical 214. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser. 15 In the dialog. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. under Warnings.

216 .

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in addition to loading existing families. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. planning is critical to a successful design. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Plumbing Plan . you create a PVC pipe type. and click Properties.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. type PVC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 219 . right-click PVC . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Sanitary. click Duplicate. Adding a pipe size. 4 In the Name dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. In this exercise.Vent. In this lesson. and verify that Level 1 .rvt. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.

select Tee. enter 46. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 26 Click OK. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Tap. enter -1250. In the Project Browser.rfa. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 17 In the left pane. select Sanitary. select Plastic. select M_Tee Sanitary . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 27 For the new pipe size. 24 For Inside Diameter. and click Main. enter 54. for Nominal.DWV: Standard. Cross. under Pipe Types. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 25 For Outside.PVC . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.PVC . select Sanitary. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and click OK.DWV: Standard. 18 For System Type. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. under Mechanical. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 13 In the right panel.Vent is listed. for Material.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.DWV. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . enter 45.006 mm. click Training Files. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.Sch 40 .293 mm. Tee. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 15 For System Type. enter 10°. 22 Click New Size. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Sch 40 . select None. and open Metric\M_Trap P . click Pipe Settings.Sch 40 . 6 Click OK. PVC . select Branch. click Modify. For Offset.000 mm. 21 In the right pane. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. add a hot water heater. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. and click OK. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select Sanitary 107. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet. The base is placed. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . select one of the components in the system. A preview of the piping layout displays. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog.

it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.19 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. select Main. 23 For Pipe Type.Sanitary. enter -350 mm. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and for Offset. You accept this suggested solution. The default settings are automatically modified. for Diameter. 27 For Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Intersections. select PVC . 25 In the left pane. 28 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -1225. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. for Solution Type. 30 Click Modify. and click OK. select Branch. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select PVC . enter -350 mm. 26 For Pipe Type. select 100 mm.Sanitary. and click Settings. for Slope. enter 1. 24 For Offset. 29 On the Options Bar. click Solutions.05%. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

as shown. 34 Click Modify. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view.33 In the 3D view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Overall. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. as shown.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. adding sinks in the men’s room. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .rvt. 5 On the Placement panel.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Public. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. as shown. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. under M_Lavatory .Rectangular. select 560 mmx560 mm . in the Type Selector. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 8 Select the sink.2. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. enter 711. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.7 Click Modify.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel. enter 711.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks.2. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 12 In the drawing area. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the System Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.Overall.Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee. 19 In the 3D view. click Finish Editing System. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.16 On the Edit System panel. double-click 3D Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.

When you press the Spacebar.05%. 26 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.22 In the plan view. press Spacebar. with the tee fitting selected. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click Apply. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). enter 760 mm. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1. and click to draw the pipe. for Offset. for Slope. 27 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and when the vertical center line displays.Sch 40 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the double wye fitting.DWV. move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard. 29 In the Type Selector. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify.PVC .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

34 Press Esc. right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and click Draw Pipe. enter 150 mm. In the next steps. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. for Offset. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. enter 305 mm. zoom in to the double wye fitting.

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. as shown. 42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. enter 150 mm. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 47 Move the cursor down. 48 Click Modify. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Esc. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 49 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe.

52 In the plan view. select the P-Trap on the left. select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.DWV. 53 Using the same method. under M_Trap P . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 51 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . 56 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 55 In the 3D view. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.PVC . 54 Click Modify.

click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and press Enter. Move the cursor to the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.. Click in the plan view. enter 150 mm. In the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

select the section of pipe you just drew. under Pipe Types. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution.■ In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. as shown. In the Type Selector. select PVC Sanitary. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.

click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1. 62 On the Options Bar. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You have appropriately sloped the pipe. click Training Files. for Slope. and verify the slope.rvt. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.05% is selected.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . as shown. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3 In the Section view.PVC . select the elbow fitting on the right.Floor level line. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Design. select Standard. right-click the top connector. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Plumbing Plan . and click Draw Pipe.Sch 40 .Overall.Design. select the vertical stack. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Selection panel. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.DWV. 5 Select the tee. 10 In the 3D view. and click to draw the pipe. click Modify.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.autodesk.rvt. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. 2 Right-click Standard. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. go to http://www. You create a new pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In this lesson. and click Duplicate. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial training files are not present. After finishing each exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 267 . A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this tutorial. However. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.

under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 2800 is specified. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. structural beams. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For System Type. or architectural components. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that 2800 is selected. and then click OK. For System Type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. and click Properties. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. duct. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. For Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 6 In the Project Browser. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Pipe Type. click Rename. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Main. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. However. 9 Click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. Next. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you modify the type properties of the pipe. In the next exercise. For Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. for Material. select Carbon Steel. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems.

2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. for Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. When you highlight a space using the cursor. enter Zone 1. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. enter Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. and then click OK.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select Spaces. For Group parameter under. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select space Instruction 221 as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name. 8 Using a crossing window. 5 Click OK twice. the space crossing lines display. under Fire Protection. right-click. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .rvt. click Training Files. Under Categories. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Element Properties.

select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. to which you add various parameters.rvt. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 2. 13 Using the same method. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. and then access instance properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Schedule keys. 6 Using the same method. For Key name. Click OK. 11 Click OK twice. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select Millimeters. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Length. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Maximum Spacing. Obstructed-Combustible. 10 In the Format dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Type of Parameter. Click OK. and on the ribbon. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. double-click on each column separator. For Group parameter under. For Units. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Unit symbol. click Add Parameter. for Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Name. select Fire Protection. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. 14 Select the new header. select 0 decimal places. For Rounding. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Formatting tab. indicating that it’s the active view. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Light.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. and click Field Format. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Maximum Spacing. select mm.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. select Spaces. enter 4575. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Click OK. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 16 Using the same method. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. and press Enter. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Ordinary. enter 40.

The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Formula. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click Field Format. For Type. For Discipline. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click OK. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 22 Click OK twice. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Number. click . This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. In the Fields dialog. For Rounding. Enter the formula operator / after Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. Click OK.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Fixed. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Common. under Available fields. select 0 decimal place. select Area. For Units. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.

25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Under Field formatting. select Number. select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. for Sort by. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and click View Properties. click Edit. and select Totals only. For Then by. under Other. Select Header and Blank line. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 26 Click OK 3 times. At the bottom of the dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then click Field Format. ■ In the Format dialog. Select Header and Blank line. and then select Hidden field. select Hidden field.

under Other. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Fields. and select Totals only. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Available fields. delete the word Maximum. select Sprinklers. and click View Properties. select Calculate totals. select Grand totals. select Embedded Schedule. and Count. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. For Category. and click View Properties. select Level equals Level 2. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. right-click the schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. System Name. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Count. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. click Edit. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. double-click Type. On the Formatting tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 30 Click OK twice. for Embedded Schedule.27 In the drawing area. click Edit. for Filter by. for Filter. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting.

you are actually editing information in a database of building information. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. As a result. 48 In the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 43 Click Cancel. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). for Protection Area Construction Type. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. double-click FP . select space 221 Instruction. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Ordinary. select Ordinary. but their values are not determined.Fire Protection Plan Design. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. 52 Click OK. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed. select Light. 41 In the plan view. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. select space 221 Instruction. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. under Identity Data.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

However. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. As you place the sprinklers. After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. By following the recommended workflow. you will understand the process. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.autodesk. and double-click Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. go to http://www. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. At the end of this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. If the tutorial training files are not present. click Training Files. 279 . methodology. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you create the system.

After placing the initial sprinkler. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When this happens. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 3 In the Project Browser. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. while pressing Ctrl. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. select the sprinklers that you placed. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice. 206. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and 207. Also. 11 In the drawing area.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 18 Type WT.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and then press Esc. Next. open Design ➤ FP . 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and 200C). as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. specify a vertical offset. 200B. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 17 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design.

After creating the logical connection. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 4100. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. 29 Press Esc. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Next. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Notice that the schedule updates. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate.19 In the floor plan. enter 2900 mm. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. for Offset. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.0. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and with piping (physical connection). In this exercise. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. In the next exercise. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. This number is determined in the schedule. move the cursor to the right. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. enter 11. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. under Constraints. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. For Number. 25 Click OK. and click Element Properties. you adjust the offset.FP_Ceiling view.

Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.Fire Protection Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Unlike logical connections (systems). 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. as shown. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click View ➤ Systems.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. indicating that it’s the active view. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 5 Right-click the header. However. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. and select Piping.

The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 11 With the system still selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Next. within the Piping Systems folder. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. named Fire Protection Wet. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and select the system. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. In the System Browser. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. press Tab. and click Select. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. select an initial piping layout.

expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. and number of elements in the system. For Offset. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). The Generate Layout tools are activated. 14 Click Finish Editing System. click Solutions.0 is specified.Wet is selected. 15 In the drawing area. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 19 Click OK. For Pipe Type. as shown. enter -3650. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. system equipment. In the left pane. When the layout is finished. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and a piping layout preview displays. enter FP Wet_Zone2. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 22 On the Options Bar.The Edit Piping System panel displays. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and on the Options Bar. select Branch. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. select 150 mm. 13 In the System Browser. click Settings. verify that Main is selected. providing system editing tools. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. 23 For Offset. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for System Name. click Place Base. verify that 2800.

A (parallel movement control) displays. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. On the Generate Layout panel. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. and green represents branch lines). verify that Network is selected. click Modify. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and select solution 4. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. Creating a Piping System | 287 . In general.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. or manually modify the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. 29 Click Finish Layout. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . select a different layout solution.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.33 Close the file with or without saving it. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 3 If necessary. 2 Zoom in. and select the elbow fitting as shown.rvt. Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. and then you create piping to physically connect them. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. the Connect Into tool.Fire Protection Piping Plan .

select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. radiators. 9 On the Edit System panel. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . air terminals. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. mechanical equipment. and pipe or duct is created. 8 In the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 5 In the drawing area. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you can select the pipe or duct. or a system component to display system tools. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.

and select solution 5. verify that Solutions is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and then tile the views. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 21 In the Piping Plan. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 14 Close the System Browser.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . for Solution Type. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. verify that Network is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Layout. 23 View the result in the 3D view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers.

Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 In the drawing area. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and then press Esc.24 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe. 29 Using the same method. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. for Offset. right-click. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. select 2800.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.rvt. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. select 1 : 50. for Scale. click Training Files. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 31 In the plan view.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click.6 Press Esc.

21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and then right-click the top connector. 12 If necessary. 17 Move the cursor up. 22 In the drawing area. select Design. For Default View Template. right-click Design ➤ FP . enter FP Section_Stair. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. and then click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. drag the top section boundary line up.Design. select MEP Section.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Identity Data. for View Name. select FP . Click OK.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 14 Select the tee fitting.Fire Protection Plan . enter 2135. for Sub-Discipline. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 . 13 Select the elbow fitting. 10 In the Project Browser. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. and press Enter. 15 Press Spacebar.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 Verify that Fire Protection . select . 26 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). verify that Automatically Connect is active. and click Draw Pipe. zoom to the hose reel cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter. 24 Select the cabinet. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.23 In the section view.

31 In the alert dialog. and then click Modify. click Yes to load a family.29 Close the section view. verify that M_Gate Valve . Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 32 In the Open dialog. and click Open. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 33 In the Type Selector.rfa.50 mm is selected. as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.rvt. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Changing the diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. and click OK. height. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. width.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. for Diameter. or width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. select 25mm. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 8 Click Modify. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. or height. width. click Check None. 7 On the Options Bar.

select the linked architectural file. Clear Leader. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. and after each segment highlights. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. . They display only in the view in which they were placed. By hiding the linked file. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. Press Esc. and click Open. 18 In the 3D view. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. click to place the tag. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view.rfa. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. NOTE Tags are view specific. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 If necessary. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag.

press Tab. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . The main piping is selected and displays in red. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. select 100mm. 21 On the Options Bar. and when the section highlights. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler.

The pipe diameter is modified. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan. for Diameter. as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. select 40mm. 24 In the drawing area. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. For additional practice. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

304 .

305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. dependent views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. click Training Files. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and apply a view template. and view references. matchlines. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. and click OK. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.rvt. and click Properties. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. 307 .

6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Apply Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Rename. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Close the file without saving. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click OK. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. and click OK. 10 In the drawing area. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. more focused. as shown. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. views and put them on the sheet. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and then press Esc. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

In the Color dialog.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. select black. Click OK. For Line Pattern. For Line Weight. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash . select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. and then press Esc. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 11. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click the current value. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

on the Options Bar. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.20 Select the upper view reference and. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. as shown. 25 Using the same method. 21 Using the same method. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. for Target view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 2 Zoom in. select Plumbing Isometric. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. right-click 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for View Name. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. enter Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 Using the same method. 4 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and click Properties.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and select the section box.Domestic Water. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and zoom to each of the view references.rvt.

The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. Click OK. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. and click to select it. for View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. The section crop lines no longer display. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. For Sub-Discipline. select 3. select Documentation. select Dash. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing. Click Apply. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and then click OK. 10 Right-click.

13 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it.

■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. click on the Format value.Isometric. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial.Sanitary Waste. 19 Using methods learned previously. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. verify that Common is selected. and in the Type Selector. and for Default View Template. and in the view properties. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. For Slope. select 1. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.16 Press Esc. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. specify Plumbing . rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar.

for Rounding.■ In the Format dialog. When the view is associated with a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 22 Click OK twice. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click to place the spot slope annotation. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.rvt. 26 Press Esc twice. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. select To the nearest 10. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. click Training Files.

5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select 1 : 50. for Scale. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.

318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 13 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. select 5. drag it to the sheet. double-click M601 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.

and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. right-click the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 17 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 319 . Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. for View Name.

22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.

29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. Creating Callout Views | 321 . enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view.

322 .

Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and annotation to create a legend. Creating Annotations In this exercise. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. 323 . duct tags. work with model-based components. linetypes. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. as shown. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m.rvt. symbols.

6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 8 With the text still selected. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 9 Press Esc twice.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. and then click Right Straight. Creating Annotations | 325 . a return diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 15 On the Options Bar. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. and a segment of rectangular duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 25 In the drawing area. 20 In the Tags dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.17 Click Modify. and click OK. clear Leader. under Category. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. for Ducts. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round.rfa. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. If necessary. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. as shown.

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Creating Annotations | 327 . Leader. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End.26 On the Options Bar.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 36 Press Esc twice.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and lock lighting fixtures. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. lay out.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and all elements of that type are affected. and click OK.rvt. 40 Using the method learned previously. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. click Training Files. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. That’s because you changed a type property. not simply an instance property. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. select the last tag placed. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. you use temporary dimensions to locate.

and then select the interior face of the wall. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. select the dimension line. 14 Using the same method. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 12 Click EQ.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 13 Press Esc. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

and offset them from the wall. Because the dimensions are locked. click Training Files. and notes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. annotation symbols. 17 Press Esc. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.9). enter 2430. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. click the 3 interior locks on the line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend In this exercise. linework. Creating a Legend | 331 . and press Enter. 20 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line.

select Floor Plan. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For Scale. select 1 : 50. For View. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.200 Neck. and select 1. enter Diffuser Legend. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 5 Click in the drawing area. Click OK. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click below the title to place the diffuser. 10 Using the same method. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. ■ 9 In the drawing area.

Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 333 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc. and select 1.

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP and its text note. The selected detail lines are now thin. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 26 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 21 Press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Legend | 335 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 34 Using the method learned previously. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. enter E. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line .

indicating that it’s the active view. detail groups. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A detail callout that references another view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. and text. A drafting view using detail components. click Training Files. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.113 East elevation view. 337 .rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing 15 In this lesson.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Next. 5 In the drawing area. place Power Riser . and click to place it. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 8 Using the same method. 4 On the Options Bar.113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. select each of the 2 panelboards.

giving the appearance of a single view. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. select the 113 North view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click OK. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Deactivate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. you add wiring to the diagram. and select Title w Line . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and click Activate View. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Press Esc. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. select the 113 East elevation view. 21 Using the drag control. In the next exercise.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. for Line Weight. 8 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. click Training Files. and then click OK.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Chain is selected. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. select 6. enter Electrical Power. Under Modify Subcategories.rvt. expand Lines. for Name. as shown. 2 Close the Project Browser. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Beginning at the transformer. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. As you draw. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . In the Line Styles dialog. and click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the New Subcategory dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. notice that there are no snaps active.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. click New. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.113 North view. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.

add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.10 Press Esc. enter 3mm. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. 11 Using the same method. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 28 Click above the cap. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 29 Click Modify. select Multiple. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and select 1.

36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.0. Press Esc. 40 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3. for Offset. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. you can ensure that they stay together. Using the same method. and press Enter. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 12. You enter exact values for each line length. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . enter 7. and press Enter. click on the length dimension value. and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 In the drawing area. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 54 Select the group. while pressing Ctrl.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. enter Ground. 51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 50 With the group selected. and click OK. for Name. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 46 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and then press Esc. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. select all 3 lines. 52 Select the detail group. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In later exercises. and will place it on sheet E01. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.

and double click Typical Make Up Air. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and Left sides converge. for Name. and then click the corner where the Top.rvt. and click Apply View Template. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. click Home. and then press Esc. Walkthroughs. and click OK. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 On the ViewCube. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. Back.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. click Training Files. 5 Right-click the copy. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 3 Select the section box.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section).

Typical. Click OK. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method. select 3D HVAC Iso. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.■ ■ Under Names. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Move the cursor down and to the left. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right).

23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. To rotate and reposition a text label. 19 Complete the text labels. and under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.18 Press Esc. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop Region Visible. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. as shown. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.

34 Close the file with or without saving it. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. and click Deactivate View. Use detail lines to create a detail group. select Crop View and Section Box. and click OK. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 30 On the View Control Bar. Place a detail component. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 29 Right click the view. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 33 Right-click the view. and click Activate View.rvt. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 32 In the Instance Properties. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and under Extents. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. scroll down.25 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. clear Crop Region Visible.

click the point at the top of the drain. select Documentation. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. as shown. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. and click Properties. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 1 : 5. Click OK. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. 13 In the drawing area.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 9 Zoom in to the component. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View Classification. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Click OK. as the rectangle start point. select Plumbing. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. right-click the view name. For Scale.

15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Concrete. 21 In the drawing area. 18 With the filled region still selected.P.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. and then press Esc. and click OK.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . for Type. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select C. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 22 Click Modify.

select the filled region. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 23 In the drawing area. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select Multiple. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 34 Press Esc. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then click to select them. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 28 Click Modify. (Line). 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 40 Click Finish Region. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.

49 Click Modify. and click OK. select the Flashing Membrane group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. for Name. press Tab to highlight the chain.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.D. as shown. and then click to select them. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 45 Using the method learned previously. (Rectangle). 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.

55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. press Spacebar twice. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.

as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.62 Press Esc twice. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End.

77 Move the cursor up and to the left.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. select 15000 (Division 15 . and click to specify the text insertion point.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 80 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 72 If necessary. 76 To select the leader start point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 81 Select the text note.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click OK. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 71 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 78 Move the cursor to the left.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc. and then press Esc twice. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. select the view title.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful